X1
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/12, 07 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 276.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
18 iDrive
25 Voice activation system
Controls
30 Opening and closing
43 Adjusting
50 Transporting children safely
54 Driving
68 Displays
80 Lamps
85 Safety
94 Driving stability control systems
98 Driving comfort
105 Climate
110 Interior equipment
120 Storage compartments
Driving tips
126 Things to remember when driving
130 Loading
133 Saving fuel
Navigation
138 Navigation system
140 Destination entry
149 Destination guidance
157 What to do if...
Entertainment
160 Tone
162 Radio
170 CD/multimedia
Communication
192 Telephone
204 Office
213 Contacts
215 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
224 Refueling
226 Fuel
228 Wheels and tires
238 Engine compartment
243 Maintenance
245 Replacing components
253 Breakdown assistance
259 Care
Reference
266 Technical data
268 Short commands for voice activation
system
276 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all
series equipment, as well as country-specific
and special equipment offered in the model ser‐
ies.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐
scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
lected special equipment or country version, for
example.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐
cle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
cle contain data memories that store technical
information on the vehicle condition, events and
faults, either temporarily or permanently. This
technical information generally documents the
state of a component, a module, a system or the
environment.
▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
nents, such as filling levels.
▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its
individual components, such as wheel rpm/
speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐
tion.
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐
tem components, such as lights and brakes.
▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐
tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the
stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
ture.
These data are of a technical nature only and are
used to detect and eliminate faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes
driven with the vehicle cannot be created from
these data. If services are used, for instance in
the event of repairs, service processes, warranty
cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical in‐
formation can be read out from the event and
fault data memories by service personnel, in‐
cluding the manufacturer, using special diagno‐
sis tools. This service personnel can provide you
with more information if needed. After trouble‐
shooting, the information in the fault memory is
cleared or overwritten continuously.
Situations are conceivable during the use of the
vehicle in which these technical data could be‐
come associated with a specific person in com‐
bination with other information, such as an ac‐
cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness
accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of
an authorized expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
calization in the event of an emergency, permit
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the ve‐
hicle.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch for rear power win‐
dows 41
2 Power windows 40
3 Exterior mirror operation 48
4 Lamps
Parking lamps 80
Low beams 80
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 81
Adaptive light control 81
High-beam Assistant 82
Front fog lamps 83
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 59
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 82
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
High-beam Assistant 82
Roadside parking lamps 82
Computer 70
Settings and information about
the vehicle 71
Instrument lighting 83
6 Steering wheel buttons, left
Telephone 192
Volume
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
vation system 25
7 Shift paddles 64
8 Instrument cluster 14
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Change the radio station
Stopping a traffic announcement
Select a music track
Scroll through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated air mode 107
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 54
11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 59
Rain sensor 60
Rear window wiper 61
12 Ignition lock 54
13 Steering wheel heating 49
14 Horn, the entire surface
15 Adjust the steering wheel 49
16 Cruise control 98
17 Opening tailgate 35
18 Releasing the hood 238
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator/warning lamps 15
3 Tachometer 69
4 Current fuel consumption 69
Engine oil temperature 69
5 Display for
▷ Clock 68
▷ External temperature 68
▷ Indicator/warning lamps 15
▷ Cruise control 98
6 Display for
▷ Automatic transmission position 62
▷ Hill Descent Control 96
▷ Computer 70
▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
maining distance to be driven 75
▷ Odometer and trip odometer 68
▷ Checking engine oil level 239
▷ Settings and information 71
▷
Check Control message
present 77
7 Fuel gauge 69
8 Resetting the trip odometer 68
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Indicator/warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed in‐
dicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information, e.g., on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Turn signals, refer to page 59
High beams/headlamp flasher, refer
to page 82
Symbol Function or system
Front fog lamps, refer to page 83
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul‐
sive forces in order to maintain driv‐
ing stability, refer to page 94
The handbrake is set, refer to
page 58
Canada: the parking brake is set, re‐
fer to page 58.
Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
fect on emissions, refer to
page 244
Canada: engine malfunction with ad‐
verse effect on exhaust emissions,
refer to page 244
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17
2 Control Display 18
3 Air vent 108
4 Hazard warning system 253
Central locking system 34
5 Automatic climate control 105
6 Glove compartment 120
7 Radio and CD/DVD drive 162
Programmable memory buttons 23
8 PDC Park Distance Control 100
Backup camera 102
HDC Hill Descent Control 96
Deactivate the Automatic Engine
Start/Stop Function 56
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 94
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 95
ECO PRO 134
9 Selector lever with automatic transmis‐
sion 62
10 Controller with buttons 18
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 262.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
Press the button Function
NAV Opens the Navigation
menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception strength
Symbol flashes: searching for net‐
work.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Symbol Meaning
Roaming is active.
Text message, e-mail was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than two seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Entering letters and numbers
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol Function
Move the controller forward:
switch from upper to lower case
letters.
Move the controller forward:
switch from lower to upper case
letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated with the
voice activation system using spoken com‐
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
cated in the area of the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 74.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indicates
that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate the
function via iDrive in this case.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
The functions of the main menu have short com‐
mands.
Some list items, such as the phone book entries,
can also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
tem. Say the list items exactly as they are dis‐
played on the list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.
Seite 25
Voice activation system At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 268.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are announced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a te‐
lephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening tailgate
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven.
Use each remote control at least twice a year for
longer road trips in order to maintain the batter‐
ies' charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 38.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
Personal Profile.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 243.
Integrated key
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated in the remote con‐
trol.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for a maximum
of four remote controls. They are stored for two
remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
tons, refer to page 23.
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 32.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
▷ Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi‐
tion after unlocking, refer to page 33.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐
play and in the instrument cluster:
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to
page 73.
▷ Date format, refer to page 74.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 75.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 74.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 72.
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance
Control PDC, refer to page 101.
▷ Backup camera:
▷ Function selection, refer to page 102.
▷ Type of display, refer to page 104.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 59.
▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 80.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 81.
▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 81.
▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
page 82.
▷ Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
cooling function and automatic recirculated
air control activated/deactivated, tempera‐
ture, air flow rate and distribution, refer to
page 105.
▷ Navigation:
▷ Voice activation, refer to page 151.
▷ Route criteria, refer to page 149.
▷ Map view settings, refer to page 152.
▷ Entertainment:
▷ Tone control, refer to page 160.
▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
page 168.
▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened to
last, refer to page 170.
▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 196.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles on the driver's and front passenger
sides.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐
fer to page 39.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system, re‐
fer to page 35.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
unlocks the entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof
open.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control for at
least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking tailgate
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second and release.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate
has not been inadvertently unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
is activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects behind the seat as a result of
a rearward movement of the seat.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Selecting automatic activation
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote
control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
In vehicles without an alarm system or Comfort
Access, only the driver's door can be unlocked
and locked using the integrated key in the door
lock.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis‐
charged. Use the remote control during an ex‐
tended drive in order to recharge the battery,
refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Access contains a battery that may need to be
replaced, refer to page 38.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
In some market-specific versions, the alarm sys‐
tem, refer to page 38, is triggered if the vehicle
is unlocked via the door lock.
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or insert the remote control into
the ignition lock all the way.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be locked via the door lock.
Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap,
and the tailgate all at once
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
gate at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior, refer to page 34.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door, refer to page 35.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock
the driver's door using the integrated key in the
door lock.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐
locked when the front doors are closed, but they
are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the button. The doors are un‐
locked. To open, pull the door han‐
dle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time and
opened the second time.
Locking
▷ Press the button. The doors are
locked.
▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
you from being locked out, the opened driv‐
er's door cannot be locked using the lock
button.
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Tailgate
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening from the inside
Press the button.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is
stationary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Opening from the outside
▷ Press the button next to the tailgate.
▷ Press the remote control button for ap‐
prox. 1 second and then release.
The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung up‐
ward.
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1.
Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge
the cargo area, refer to page 115.
2. From the cargo area, press out the handle in
the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far as
possible. The tailgate is unlocked.
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press
in the handle.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the
cargo floor panel is not raised, refer to
page 118.
Keep the closing area clear
Make sure that the closing area of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may
result.◀
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
▷ Convenient closing.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Functional requirement
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas‐
senger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
If a remote control is detected within the vehicle,
the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
In addition, the windows and the panoramic
glass sunroof close.
Monitor the closing process
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.◀
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
gate opens again.
Ignition on
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on.
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal,
otherwise the engine will start.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 54.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off with trans‐
mission position P engaged, refer to page 56.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
To switch the engine off with transmission po‐
sition N engaged, insert the remote control in
the ignition lock.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone
in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or
when a mobile phone is being charged in the
vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
control into the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot be
started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐
nition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no lon‐
ger inside the vehicle.
After switching off the engine, the engine can
only be started again within approx. 10 seconds
if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display: replace
the remote control battery.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 30.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards.
4. Press the cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec‐
tion point or to your service center.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 39.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some market-specific versions.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
warning system flashes once.
In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 32.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
sensor is not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the ig‐
nition, but for no longer than approx. 5 mi‐
nutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Panic mode
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
tem:
Press the button on the remote control for at
least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor
For the sensor to function properly, the windows
and panoramic glass sunroof must be closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
remain switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com‐
fort Access.
After the ignition is switched off
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐
nition is switched off, the windows can continue
to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as
no door is opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Do not use window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, such as by
children.
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
switch.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays completely
open.
Pressing the switch again
closes the sliding visor al‐
most completely.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐
bed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Com‐
fort Access.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐
partment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
the switch.
After the ignition is switched off
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Initialization after a power failure
After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
the roof, if necessary.
Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
ter.
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 45.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 46.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 85.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
Adjusting manually
Forward/backward
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest
or lift it off, as necessary.
Seite 43
Adjusting Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐
ward or back.
Adjusting electrically
1 Forward/backward
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest
The head restraint can be adjusted manually,
refer Head restraints below.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
▷ Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.
Backrest width
Seite 44
Controls Adjusting
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.
Press front or rear section of switch.
The backrest width decreases or increases.
Adjusting the rear seat backrests
Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 115.
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes,
the seat heating is activated automatically with
the temperature set last.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat‐
tery. The LEDs remain lit.
Safety belts
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Seats with safety belt
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
into the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
passengers riding in the center position.
▷ If the middle safety belt is used in the rear,
the left backrest must be locked, refer to
page 115; otherwise, the safety belt will not
have a restraining effect.
Notes
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Seite 45
Adjusting Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display. Check
whether the safety belt has been fas‐
tened correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
prox. at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front
Height adjustment
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Seite 46
Controls Adjusting
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Rear
Height adjustment
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
The height of the middle head restraint cannot
be adjusted.
Removing at the front and rear
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull upward as far as possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely
pull out the head restraint with the rear seat
backrest folded forward slightly.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat and mirror memory
General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved.
The adjustment of the backrest width and the
lumbar support is not stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐
tion, refer to page 54.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The
LED goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again. The LED goes
out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving,
as an unexpected seat movement could result
in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
page 54.
2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
ton 1 or 2.
The seat is automatically moved to the stored
position.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
Seite 47
Adjusting Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐
tion on or off, refer to page 54.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
pleted.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Fold in and out
3 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 47.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission
position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press button 2.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature
Two photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear only,
using child restraint fixing systems suitable for
the age, weight, and height of the child; other‐
wise, there is an increased risk of injury in an ac‐
cident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat, make
sure that the front and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated. Automatic de‐
activation of front passenger airbags, refer to
page 86.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system on
the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side are
deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
Seite 50
Controls Transporting children safely
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 44, completely. Do not
change the backrest width after this.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated cover caps.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Seite 51
Transporting children safely Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
There are three mounting points, see arrows, for
the upper retaining strap of LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀
Outer rear seats
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.
Seite 52
Controls Transporting children safely
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Center rear seat
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
On outer rear seats:
1.
Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
On center rear seat:
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks the rear window switches so that the
windows cannot be operated from the rear:
safety switch, refer to page 41.
Seite 53
Transporting children safely Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the ig‐
nition lock.
▷ Radio ready state is switched on. Individual
electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock,
refer to page 36, under special circumstances.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
▷ The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You can only take out the remote control if trans‐
mission position P is engaged: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed
when you press the Start/Stop button.
Radio ready state
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the external temperature are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
page 36, by touching the surface above the
door lock.
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Seite 54
Controls Driving
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Radio ready state and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Automatic transmission, 8-gear
In certain situations, transmission position P is
engaged automatically. To make it possible for
the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car
wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re‐
fer to page 259.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐
tion P and set the handbrake firmly; otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Com‐
fort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position P if neces‐
sary.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
selves.◀
Set the handbrake and further secure the
vehicle as required
Set the handbrake firmly when parking; other‐
wise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and
downward inclines, further secure the vehicle,
for example, by turning the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb.◀
Seite 55
Driving Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Before driving into a car wash
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
page 259.
Switching off the engine
Automatic transmission
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the handbrake firmly.
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 54.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts automatically when you wish to
drive away.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic operation
The automatic engine Start/Stop function is op‐
erational after each engine start.
The function is activated at a certain speed:
▷ Automatic transmission: at 5 mph/9 km/h.
Automatic engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill.
▷ The driver's safety belt is fastened or the
driver's door is closed.
When the engine is switched off, the air volume
of the automatic climate control is reduced.
Indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
The indicator lamp lights up when the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The indicator lamp lights up if the re‐
quirements for an automatic engine
stop are not fulfilled.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperatures below ap‐
prox. 37 ℉/+3 ℃.
▷ High external temperature and operation of
the automatic climate control.
▷ The interior is not yet heated or cooled as
much as desired.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel
is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Hood is unlocked.
▷ HDC is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The selector lever is in position N or S/M.
The indicator lamp is lit.
Seite 56
Controls Driving
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Parking the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
The vehicle can be parked safely during an au‐
tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to
leave the vehicle.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Automatic transmission: transmission posi‐
tion P is engaged automatically.
2. Set the handbrake.
Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop
button.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive
away:
▷ Automatic transmission:
The brake pedal is released.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
The engine does not start by itself after it is
switched off automatically if any of the following
conditions are fulfilled:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unfastened or the
driver's door is open.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
The indicator lamp lights up. A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
Note
Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop‐
ped engine still starts automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ The interior has heated up strongly with the
cooling function switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ The vehicle begins to roll.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/
S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ The interior has cooled down strongly with
the heating switched on.
▷ Low braking pressure, such as from de‐
pressing the brake pedal a number of times
consecutively.
Preventing automatic engine stop with
an automatic transmission
The concept
To permit the driver to drive away especially
quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic
engine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing the engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Depress the brake pedal briefly and force‐
fully immediately after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
▷ Then continue depressing the brake pedal
with normal braking force.
Seite 57
Driving Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Press the button.
▷ LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function
is activated.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically in the interest
of safety, for example if the driver's absence is
detected.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp lights up. The au‐
tomatic engine start/stop function no
longer switches of the engine auto‐
matically.A message appears on the Control
Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have
the system checked.
Handbrake
The concept
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up and an
acoustic signal sounds when driving
away. The handbrake is still set.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
lever.
Notes
Using the handbrake while driving
If it should become necessary to use the
handbrake while driving, do not pull the hand‐
brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the
handbrake lever pressed at all times.
Excessive application of the handbrake can
block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
the vehicle.◀
To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action,
lightly apply the handbrake from time to time
when coasting, traffic conditions permitting.
The brake lamps do not light up when the hand‐
brake is pulled.
Seite 58
Controls Driving
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn sig‐
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect.◀
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
High beams, headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
Washer/wiper system
Notes
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield;
otherwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐
idly or become damaged.◀
Seite 59
Driving Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
At a glance
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen‐
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or the rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3.
The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and
a wiping cycle is started.
Setting intermittent wipe or the
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or the
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Cleaning the windshield and
headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Seite 60
Controls Driving
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and ap‐
propriate intervals.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the ig‐
nition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
washer/wiper system, refer to page 59, must be
reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Rear window wiper
1 Intermittent wipe
When reverse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
2 Cleaning the rear window
The rear window wiper does not move if the lever
is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on.
To switch on the rear window wiper:
1.
Move the lever to its basic position.
2. Select the required position again.
Do not use the washing mechanisms
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty
Do not use washing mechanisms when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
will damage the washer pump.◀
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Seite 61
Driving Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, 6-gear
In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears
can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,
refer to page 63.
Parking the vehicle
Secure the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, move the selector lever to position P
and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle
will begin moving.◀
Disengaging the remote control
To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the
remote control from the ignition lock, refer to
page 54.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved out
of position P.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the
brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐
wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Seite 62
Controls Driving
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging
selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the
lock, press the button on the front of the selector
lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
rear wheels are locked.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument
panel, followed by the current gear.
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐
matic mode, the transmission switches to
manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
the transmission switches back to auto‐
matic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,
manual mode remains active.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle –.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high. The se‐
lected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument
panel, followed by the current gear.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐
though the ignition is switched on, the brake is
depressed, and the button on the selector lever
is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐
ridden:
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever un‐
til the sleeve is inside out.
4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, refer
to page 245, press the red lever while mov‐
ing the selector lever to the desired position
with the button pressed.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic, 8-gear
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
sition D.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged after the engine is switched
off if the remote control remains in the ignition
lock. This function can be used in an automatic
car wash, refer to page 259, for example. P is
automatically engaged after approx. 30 minutes.
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically when the following
conditions are met:
▷ The driver's door is opened while the engine
is running, the safety belt is not fastened and
neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator
is activated.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐
tion lock.
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
nition lock.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the trans‐
mission position P is engaged; otherwise, the
vehicle may begin to roll.
Engaging transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀
Engaging transmission positions D, R,
N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously
push the unlock button 1.
The engaged transmission position is displayed
on the selector lever.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Engaging transmission position P
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press button P.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the Sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears while in automatic mode
D, the transmission temporarily switches to
manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate
or shift gears for a certain amount of time,
the transmission switches back to auto‐
matic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S selected,
the manual mode remains active.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Displays
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Odometer, external
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 External temperature display and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
external temperature and odometer are dis‐
played.
Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the external
temperature, refer to page 72.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Time, external temperature display
Set the time, refer to page 72.
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition
lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Seite 68
Controls Displays
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 242.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
perature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 239.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates
the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 224.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
Seite 69
Displays Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range of
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Computer
Displaying information on the
instrument panel
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Overview of the information
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever displays the information on the instru‐
ment cluster in the following order:
▷ Range.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ No information.
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
to page 72.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the
engine was switched off manually are not in‐
cluded in the average speed calculations.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
can have the average speed displayed for an ad‐
ditional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button on
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displays on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
Seite 70
Controls Displays
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination was
entered in the navigation system, refer to
page 140.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
▷ Departure time.
▷ Trip duration.
▷ Trip distance.
Both displays show:
▷ Average fuel consumption and
▷ Average speed.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating concept
Certain settings and information can only be
called up when the ignition is switched on. A
number of settings cannot be made while driv‐
ing.
1 Button for:
▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Setting values.
2 Button for:
▷ Confirming the selected display or set
values.
▷ Calling up computer information 70.
Seite 71
Displays Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Symbol Function
With the lights switched on:
Dimming instrument lighting,
refer to page 83
Calling up Check Control, refer
to page 77
Checking the engine oil level,
refer to page 239
Setting the time, refer to
page 72
Setting the date, refer to
page 73
Viewing service requirement
display, refer to page 75
Exiting displays
The external temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you make
no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required,
complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
The units for fuel consumption, route/distance,
temperature, and pressure can be changed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Clock
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
time format below.
1.
Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompanied
by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
Seite 72
Controls Displays
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via the iDrive
1.
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to
page 30.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1.
Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
Seite 73
Displays Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
symbol appears in the display, accompanied
by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Settings on the Control
Display
Language
Setting the language
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 26.
Seite 74
Controls Displays
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Brightness
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic
setting can be adjusted.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service spe‐
cialist.
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for
that operation in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐
priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐
companied by the words "SERVICE INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Displays
Symbol Function
Service requirements
Engine oil
Roadworthiness test
Seite 75
Displays Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Symbol Function
Front brake pads
Rear brake pads
Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. First the data for the next maintenance are
displayed.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
Additional information can be displayed on each
entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 73.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
date entry is stored.
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐
tems monitored.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and,
in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and
text messages at the top of the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
The symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. The Check Control
messages can be displayed later.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐
strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐
sage and the meaning of the indicator and warn‐
ing lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Symbols
The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending on
the Check Control message.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button in the turn signal
lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden.
If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again later.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1.
Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐
priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐
companied by the words "CHECK CON‐
TROL".
2. Press button 2.
If there is no Check Control message, this is
indicated by "CHECK OK“. If a Check Con‐
trol message has been stored, the corre‐
sponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied
by a text message on the Control Display.
3. Press button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the external tem‐
perature and the time.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that were displayed during a
trip are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Speed limit
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a Check Control message to be
issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
At a glance
1 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light
control / high-beam Assistant / welcome
lamps / daytime running lights
2 Lamps off / daytime running lights
3 Parking lamps / daytime running lights
4 Low beams/welcome lamps
5 Fog lamps
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off
automatically in the following switch settings:
0, ,
Parking lamps
Switch position
: the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 82.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 80
Controls Lamps
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The LED next to
the symbol lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you
switch on the front fog lamps.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
tion 0,
and . After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn‐
ing, up to a certain speed one of the two front
fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This
provides improved illumination of the area inside
the curve.
Controls
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
Seite 81
Lamps Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Adaptive light control is malfunction‐
ing or has failed. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Left and right roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long
periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not
have enough power to start the engine.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
to the pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the lights are switched on, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1.
Turn the light switch to .
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direction
of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
Seite 82
Controls Lamps
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams.
Activating/deactivating via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
The view field of the sensor is located on the
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 81, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.
Instrument lighting
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
1.
Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis‐
Seite 83
Lamps Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
play, accompanied by the brightness setting
and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de‐
sired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the external tem‐
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps,
trunk lamps, and courtesy lamps are controlled
automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 54.
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
Danger of burns
Do not reach into the opening of the lamps;
otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
Ambient lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior light‐
ing can be set individually for some lamps.
Selecting the color scheme
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
Seite 84
Controls Lamps
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Safety
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Airbags
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags
4 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 85
Safety Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are activated or deactivated accordingly
by the system.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror shows the current status of the front pas‐
senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.
Seite 86
Controls Safety
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions under Children on the front passenger
seat, refer to page 50.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐
ion can be detected correctly:
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion pad‐
ding, ball mats or other items to the passen‐
ger seat unless they are specifically recom‐
mended by BMW.
▷ Do not place any objects on the front pas‐
senger seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Seite 87
Safety Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Operational readiness of airbag system
When the ignition is switched on,, refer
to page 54, the warning lamp comes on
briefly to indicate that the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after the
ignition is switched on.
▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on.
Have the airbag system checked without
delay if there is a malfunction
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
occurs.◀
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
tion pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Seite 88
Controls Safety
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Seite 89
Safety Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
by the TPM
Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this may be:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
Seite 90
Controls Safety
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically as
you drive. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is
shown.
Low tire pressure message
The small warning lamp lights up yel‐
low and the large warning lamp lights
up red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues warnings based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. Reset the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Seite 91
Safety Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The system detected a wheel change but was
not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐
low and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning lamp comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
tem again.
The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐
low and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning lamp comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the ve‐
hicle's handling and stopping ability.
Seite 92
Controls Safety
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re‐
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi‐
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 93
Safety Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Electronic brake-force
distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Do not reduce the additional safety margin with
a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk
of an accident.◀
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
Seite 94
Controls Driving stability control systems
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti‐
vated together.
In the interest of better forward momentum,
brake intervention is performed in the manner of
a differential lock when the drive wheels spin
quickly even if DSC is deactivated.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DSC deactivated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
cluster.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in
deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for
DSC OFF lights up.
Seite 95
Driving stability control systems Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC has failed.
DTC activated:
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC‐
TION appears in the instrument cluster.
DTC is activated.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle. To enhance performance during
sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of the
curve is braked while the resulting braking effect
is largely compensated by engine intervention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axle depending on the driving sit‐
uation and prevailing road conditions.
Hill Descent Control HDC
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica‐
tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
twice walking speed.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill at below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it con‐
stant.
While you are actively braking, the system is on
standby. The system does not brake the vehicle
during this time.
Increasing or reducing speed
The speed can be changed in the range from
roughly twice walking speed to approx.
15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or
brake pedal lightly.
A target speed within the same range can be
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
1 Increasing speed
2 Decreasing speed
Seite 96
Controls Driving stability control systems
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the
button lights up.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
HDC can be used in every driving position.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera‐
tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available due
to high brake temperatures or DSC has failed.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The handbrake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels depending on the
speed at which you are driving.
Power steering provides strong support at low
speeds, which means that less effort is needed
to turn the wheels. Power steering support less‐
ens as your speed increases.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
Seite 97
Driving stability control systems Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Do not use cruise control
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat‐
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
resistance point.
The car's current speed is stored and main‐
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect
is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will
brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point of
resistance, the desired speed increases by
approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
Seite 98
Controls Driving comfort
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, ar‐
row 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
accelerator pedal. The system stores and main‐
tains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the re‐
sistance point, the desired speed is reduced
by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum
speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Push the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti‐
vated when:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged or
transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp comes on when
cruise control has been deactivated as
a result of DSC intervention, for exam‐
ple. A message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed
is resumed and maintained.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When driving stability control systems inter‐
vene.
▷ When selector lever position N is engaged
or transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly,
conditions may not be adequate to operate the
system.
Call up Check Control messages, refer to
page 78.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. The sys‐
tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
A message appears on the Control
Display. More information, refer to page 77.
Seite 99
Driving comfort Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Park Distance Control PDC
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera, refer to page 102, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐
proach to an object in front of or behind your ve‐
hicle is announced by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Seite 100
Controls Driving comfort
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 161.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are displayed on the Control Display before a
signal tone sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
era, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:
"Switch off rear view camera"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 101
Driving comfort Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Malfunction
A Check Control message, refer to page 77, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC
has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Rear view camera
The concept
The rear view camera assists you when parking
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish this,
the region behind your vehicle is shown on the
Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
Switching off automatically when
driving forward
The system switches off when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
era via the iDrive, refer to page 101.
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
Seite 102
Controls Driving comfort
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Pathway lines
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera when the transmission is in re‐
verse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of space
when parking and maneuvering on a flat road
surface.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to
page 104.
Turning lines
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning circle
on a flat road surface.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only one
turning line is displayed.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to
page 104.
Parking using pathway and turning
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
lead into the margins of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
be displayed in the image of the rear view
camera.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
the object pictured.
Seite 103
Driving comfort Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 104.
Activating assistance functions
Several assistance functions can be active at the
same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐
played.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The lens of the rear view camera is under the
grasping lip of the tailgate.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Seite 104
Controls Driving comfort
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Climate
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Automatic climate control
1 Manual air distribution
2 Maximum cooling
3 Temperature, left
4 AUTO program
5 Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity
6 Display
7 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐
lated air mode
8 ALL program
9 Temperature, right
10 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
11 Switching cooling function on/off manually
12 Rear window defroster
13 Seat heating, right 45
14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
15 Seat heating, left 45
Seite 105
Climate Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Comfortable interior climate
For almost all conditions, the AUTO program 4
offers the optimum air distribution and air flow
rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
comfortable interior temperature only.
The following sections contain more detailed in‐
formation on the available setting options.
Most of these settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use, Personal Profile set‐
tings, refer to page 31.
Manual air distribution
Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Footwell.
The programs can be combined as necessary.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the external
temperature.
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐
gardless of the external temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program in such a way that window
condensation is prevented as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Seite 106
Controls Climate
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off
the recirculated-air mode and press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Via the button on the steering wheel
A button on the steering wheel can be used to
quickly switch between recirculated air mode
and the previous setting.
ALL program
Press the button.
The current temperature setting for the
driver's side is transferred to the front passenger
side.
If the temperature setting is changed on the
driver's side, the temperature on the front pas‐
senger side changes as well.
The program is switched off if the setting is
changed on the front passenger side or the but‐
ton is pressed again.
Defrosting and defogging windows
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
– depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 128, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Seite 107
Climate Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press and hold the left button or, with
the setting at the lowest level, press the
left button.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win‐
dow defroster if it is switched on.
When the automatic climate control is switched
off, the supply of outside air is suspended. If the
air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over,
switch the system back on and increase the air
flow rate.
Switching on
Press any button, except for the buttons for the
ALL program or rear window heating.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and
close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direction,
e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.
Draft-free ventilation
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
Your service center replaces this combined filter
during routine maintenance.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
peratures.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by using
a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on
for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, refrain from activating it twice
in succession without allowing the battery to be
recharged in normal operation between use.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Seite 108
Controls Climate
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 109
Climate Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Universal Garage Door
Opener
The concept
The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or light‐
ing systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
ters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror must be programmed for the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for
the system is needed for the programming pro‐
cedure.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals, or objects in the range of movement of the
remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a
risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for security reasons.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
system being operated, the system is generally
compatible with the Universal Garage Door
Opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
1 LED
2 Buttons
3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
gramming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
programmed settings of the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror are deleted.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror. The required
Seite 110
Controls Interior equipment
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
distance depends on the particular hand-
held transmitter.
4. Press the button of the desired function on
the hand-held transmitter and the button
being programmed on the interior rearview
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at
first.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release
both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that
the button on the interior rearview mirror has
been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐
onds, change the distance between the in‐
terior rearview mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple tri‐
als at different distances may be necessary.
Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be operated with the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror.
Special characteristics of alternating-
code radio systems
If the system cannot be operated after repeated
programming, check whether the system to be
operated uses an alternating-code system.
Read the operating instructions of the system or
press and hold the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then
lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system
is equipped with an alternating-code system.
This flashing LED pattern repeats itself for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds.
In systems with an alternating-code system, the
Universal Garage Door Opener and the system
must be additionally synchronized.
Please obtain additional information on syn‐
chronization in the operating instructions of the
system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.
Synchronization:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the corresponding button on the
interior rearview mirror as described.
3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Press and hold the button on the interior
rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the synchro‐
nization procedure. When synchronization
is completed, the programmed function is
executed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
memory buttons.
The required distance depends on the par‐
ticular hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the memory button of the Universal
Garage Door Opener.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
and repeat the step. If programming was
aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
down the memory button and press and re‐
lease the button on the hand-held transmit‐
ter several times for 2 seconds.
Seite 111
Interior equipment Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Controls
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
people, animals, or objects in the range of move‐
ment of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐
ception range of the system, press and hold the
button until the function is initiated. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐
ously while the radio signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press the right and left buttons on the interior
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐
not be deleted individually.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen. The following adjustment options
are displayed one after the other, depending on
how long the adjustment button is pressed:
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
steering.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐
hicle's geographic location so that the compass
can function correctly; refer to the world map
with compass zones.
Seite 112
Controls Interior equipment
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.
The number of the compass zone set is shown
in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel
changes.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1.
Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough space
to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full
circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
When the system is calibrated, the C is re‐
placed by the compass directions.
Right-hand/left-hand steering
The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.
Briefly press the adjustment button again to
switch between English "E" and German "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Seite 113
Interior equipment Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Opening
Pull cover 2 up.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Connecting electrical devices
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Rear center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In storage compartment under center
armrest
To access the socket: remove the cover.
Seite 114
Controls Interior equipment
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
In cargo area
Fold open the cover.
Cargo area
Cargo covers
Do not place objects on the covers
Do not place objects on the covers. If you
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
damage the covers.◀
To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re‐
moved.
Rear cover
1.
Detach the securing straps from the tailgate.
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
back and out of the brackets, arrows 2.
Front cover
1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets on
both sides at the rear, arrow.
2. Pull the cover back, lifting it up and out of the
side brackets.
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrests.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40-20-40.
The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different
positions between the comfort and transport
positions and they can be folded down.
In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted
back to the greatest possible angle and in the
transport position they are nearly vertical.
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system,
note the instructions, refer to page 50.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that path of movement of the back‐
rests is clear. Especially when the middle sec‐
tion is folded down, ensure that no one is located
in or reaches into the path of movement of the
rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injuries or dam‐
age may result.◀
Seite 115
Interior equipment Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt
Observe the instructions concerning the safety
belt, refer to page 45. Otherwise, personal pro‐
tection may be compromised.◀
Outside backrests
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to‐
ward the front.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position
or fold it down.
On the left side, the outer and center backrests
are adjusted jointly toward the front if both back‐
rests are engaged in the same lock-in position.
The backrests can be adjusted separately to‐
ward the rear. Note that the center backrest can‐
not be tilted farther down than the left backrest.
Center backrest only
1.
Pull the loop, arrow.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position
or fold it down.
Folding the backrests back up
When the backrests are folded back up, they
engage in the transport position.
To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort posi‐
tion, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or the
loop of the center backrest forward.
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
Partition net
Firmly attach the partition net
Make sure that the partition net is firmly
attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
The partition net can be attached behind the
front or rear seats.
Before installing
1.
Remove the pouch with the partition net
from the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐
roll it, and unfold it.
After use, fold and roll up the partition net in
the same manner and place it in the pouch
so that it can be stowed back under the
cargo floor panel.
Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles
do not rest on the rod elements.
3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
the rod elements engage.
Mounting eyes
Four mounting eyes are located on the back of
the rear seat backrests.
Seite 116
Controls Interior equipment
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1.
▷ Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2.
Label
Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi‐
tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back.
The partition net is labeled accordingly.
Installation behind the rear seats
1.
If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for‐
ward and remove the front cargo cover, refer
to page 115.
2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear brack‐
ets in the headliner to the point where they
engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the
way into the holders on both sides and slide
forward.
4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re‐
taining straps into the eyelets on the rear
seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Installation behind the front seats
1.
Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
Enlarging the cargo area.
2. Fold open the cover caps of the front brack‐
ets in the headliner to the point where they
engage.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the way
into the holders on both sides and slide for‐
ward.
4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re‐
taining straps into the upper eyelets on the
rear seat backrest on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Seite 117
Interior equipment Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Removing
To remove and stow the partition net, proceed
in reverse order.
To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows.
Cargo floor panel
Compartment in floor
Note the maximum permissible load
Do not exceed a maximum load of
55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be‐
neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor‐
age compartment at the rear.
To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge of
the storage compartment.
The storage compartment can be removed if
necessary.
Raising the cargo floor panel
Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left,
right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for‐
ward, pressing it into the gap between the cargo
area floor and the rear seat backrest.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor
panel when it is upright.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel
when it is upright, do not press up or down on it,
and do not adjust the rear seat backrests; oth‐
erwise, damage may result.◀
Before closing the tailgate, fold down the cargo
floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel
toward the rear, raising it up and out of the gap.
The cargo floor panel can be removed if neces‐
sary.
Lashing eyes
To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw
straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo
area, refer to page 131.
Multi-function hooks
Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and
totes, for example, are located on the left and
right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.
Do not hang heavy items from the hooks
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
objects flying about during braking and evasive
maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Seite 118
Controls Interior equipment
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Ski and snowboard bag
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
Seite 119
Interior equipment Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard
Do not use non-slip materials, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Port for importing and exporting data, such as
music collections, refer to page 176, on USB
devices.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a compartment with cupholders or the
Seite 120
Controls Storage compartments
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
cover for the snap-in adapter, depending on the
version.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 202.
Opening
Pull the center armrest upward.
Adjusting
Slide the center armrest into the desired posi‐
tion.
Center armrest
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
When folding up, push the center armrest firmly
back into the rear seat backrest.
Connection for an external
audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 181.
▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 182.
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Interior
▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 120.
▷ Compartments in the center console.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re‐
fer to page 122.
Cargo area
▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 131.
▷ Storage compartment under the cargo floor
panel, refer to page 118.
▷ Left and right storage compartments.
▷ Multi-function hook, refer to page 118.
Storage compartment package
For your comfort:
Interior
▷ Insertable cupholder, refer to page 122.
▷ Front center armrest, refer to page 120.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Retaining straps in the front door compart‐
ments.
▷ Rear center armrest with integrated cu‐
pholders.
Seite 121
Storage compartments Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Cargo area
▷ Retaining strap on the left side panel for se‐
curing small items.
▷ Retaining straps on the cargo area floor.
▷ Insertable partition elements for the storage
compartment under the cargo floor panel,
used to variably subdivide the storage com‐
partment.
With partition net: arrange the partition ele‐
ments in such a way that there is enough
space at the rear of the storage compart‐
ment for the partition net.
▷ Storage net next to the storage compart‐
ment on the right in the cargo area.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Front
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam‐
ple.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
the bottom slanted toward the front.
▷ In the center console.
Insertable cupholder.
The insertable cupholder is located in the com‐
partment below the center armrest.
Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center
console.
Rear
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for ex‐
ample.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
the bottom slanted toward the front.
▷ In the center armrest.
Seite 122
Controls Storage compartments
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.
Seite 123
Storage compartments Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speeds:
▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an
accident occurs or during braking or evasive
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the passenger compartment.◀
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
the tailgate open:
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Close all windows and the panoramic glass
sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Seite 126
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass,
etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust
system during driving, while in idle position
mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal
injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones without a direct connec‐
tion to an external aerial in the vehicle's passen‐
ger compartment. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
refer to page 234.
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal
pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake
wear and possibly even brake failure.◀
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Seite 127
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic
transmission, refer to page 63.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Driving on poor roads
BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system
with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other‐
wise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving; never take risks.
▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
The steeper and rougher the road surface is,
the lower the speed should be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
grades: the engine oil and coolant should be
filled nearly to the MAX mark.
▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to
page 96, on steep downhill grades.
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obstacles
and drive around these where possible.
Seite 128
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 12 in‐
ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 95, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable
the driving stability control systems to dis‐
tribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
After driving on poor roads
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehicle
safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
Seite 129
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Loading
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
Seite 130
Driving tips Loading
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the back‐
rests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge
of the backrests.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow cargo.
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 116, to
protect passengers. Make sure that objects
cannot penetrate the partition net.
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.
Cargo straps can be attached to two lashing
eyes on the cargo area side panel, arrows 1,
and two lashing eyes on the cargo area rear
panel, arrows 2.
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described
above; otherwise it may present a danger to the
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
passenger compartment without securing
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and
avoidance maneuvers.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, as
excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and
may also place you in violation of traffic safety
laws.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
using the upper top tether, refer to page 51,
mounting points; otherwise, these may become
damaged.◀
Seite 131
Loading Driving tips
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Notes
A special rack system is available as an optional
accessory.
Anchorage points
The anchorage points are located on the roof
railing.
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roof-
mounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the panoramic glass sun‐
roof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,
for instance using lashing straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Rear luggage rack
Notes
A special rear rack is available as an optional ac‐
cessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
rack.
Anchorage points
The anchorage points are under the covers in
the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to
page 258.
Seite 132
Driving tips Loading
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
page 243, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Closing the windows and
panoramic glass sunroof
Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and
windows open results in increased air resistance
and raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 228, at least twice a
month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con‐
sumption and minimizes wear.
Seite 133
Saving fuel Driving tips
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve‐
hicle automatically switches off the engine dur‐
ing a stop. Additional information on the Auto‐
matic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to
page 56.
If the engine is stopped and then started again,
fuel consumption and emissions drop com‐
pared to an engine that runs permanently. Stop‐
ping the engine even for just a few seconds can
result in savings.
Use of this system can cause premature wear on
certain vehicle components.
In addition, fuel consumption depends on other
factors as well, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance, and environmental fac‐
tors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 243.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high
fuel economy. Engine control and comfort func‐
tions, such as the climate control system, are
adjusted accordingly.
In addition, situation-related information can be
displayed that helps the driver achieve lower fuel
consumption.
The resulting range extension can be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Activating ECO PRO
Press the button; the LED above the
button lights up.
ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster and
DSC is activated if necessary.
Seite 134
Driving tips Saving fuel
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Displays in the instrument cluster
After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus range
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range
The vehicle's cruising range can be extended by
adjusting your driving style.
This extended range can be displayed as a bo‐
nus range in the instrument cluster.
The bonus range is indicated in the range dis‐
play.
The bonus range is automatically reset after re‐
fueling.
Driving style
ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current
driving style in the instrument cluster.
▷ ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving
style.
▷ ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving
style, for example by accelerating less
quickly.
To drive efficiently:
▷ Accelerate less quickly.
▷ Brake in advance.
▷ Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
▷ Automatic transmission: shift from S to D, or
avoid shifting manually.
ECO PRO tip
Situation-related tips that indicate measures to
achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis‐
played.
A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.
Displaying the ECO PRO tip
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "ECO PRO Tips"
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel
economy.
To achieve better fuel economy, the actual tem‐
perature may vary slightly from the set temper‐
ature and the passenger compartment may be
heated or cooled more slowly.
Deactivating ECO PRO
Press the button again.
The LED above the button and the ECO
PRO display in the instrument cluster go out.
Seite 135
Saving fuel Driving tips
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Opening the navigation system
1. Press the button on the controller.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con‐
troller.
Navigation data
Information on navigation data
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data version.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
data after the update.
Performing an update
1.
Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Navigation update"
Seite 138
Navigation Navigation system
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Removing navigation DVD
1.
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Seite 139
Navigation system Navigation
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
At a glance
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
▷ Select the destination from the address
book, refer to page 142.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 143.
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 143.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 145.
▷ Using the home address as the destination,
refer to page 143.
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 146.
▷ Enter the destination via BMW Assist, refer
to page 145.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 24.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Seite 140
Navigation Destination entry
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1.
Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1.
Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination
city/town
The desired street does not exist in the specified
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
displayed.
All streets of the selected state/province are
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Seite 141
Destination entry Navigation
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add, refer to page 147, a destination as a
further destination.
Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 213.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as des‐
tinations in the contacts.
If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐
bile phone are not displayed, they first need
to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 214.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
Seite 142
Navigation Destination entry
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 206.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
General information
Even with the latest navigation data, information
on specific special destinations may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not be
in operation.
Seite 143
Destination entry Navigation
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Opening the search for special
destinations
Selection of special destinations, such as hotels
or tourist attractions.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
Online Search
1. "Google™ Local Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1.
"A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
9. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
10. Select the symbol.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 147.
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the search is repeated with the previous search
term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter the town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select the category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 147.
Display of special destinations
List of special destinations: special destinations
are arranged by distance and appear with a di‐
rectional arrow pointing to the special destina‐
tion.
In the splitscreen, special destinations of the se‐
lected category are displayed in the map view as
symbols. The display depends on the scale of
the map and the category.
Seite 144
Navigation Destination entry
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Destination entry via BMW Assist
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 216.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
Specifying the street
If the system does not recognize the street, one
of the following pieces of information is dis‐
played:
▷ A street name in the vicinity.
▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 147.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
cial destinations is started.
Seite 145
Destination entry Navigation
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Destination entry by voice
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
Saying the entries
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
can be entered using a single command.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 74.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a whole word, the system language must
be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
gation data in use and the country and lan‐
guage settings.
Entering the address in a command
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g., the town/
city.
Entering a town/city separately
The town/city can be said as a complete word.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
5. Select a location:
▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹.
▷ Select a different town/city: ›New entry‹.
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
entry 2.
▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1.
Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en‐
tered.
1.
›House number‹
Seite 146
Navigation Destination entry
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Starting destination guidance
›Start guidance‹
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for a trip.
1.
"Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located at the desired location
in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "OK"
Selecting a stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1.
"Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Seite 147
Destination entry Navigation
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Intermediate destination options
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Opening the last trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 148
Navigation Destination entry
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Starting destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 140.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is shown on the Control Display.
The distance to the destination/intermediate
destination and the estimated time of arrival are
displayed in the map view.
Terminating destination
guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from the
route you would take based on personal ex‐
perience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 155.
Changing the route criteria
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest pos‐
sible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "ECO PRO route": optimized com‐
bination of the fastest and shortest
route.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress will
be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive destination guidance.
Seite 149
Destination guidance Navigation
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The individual suggestions are high‐
lighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view.
▷ List of route sections.
▷ Map view, refer to page 151.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying a list of route sections
When destination guidance is active, a list of the
route sections can be displayed. The driving dis‐
tance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each
route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Bypassing a section of the
route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐
meters within which you would like to return
to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Seite 150
Navigation Destination guidance
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are displayed if needed.
Even with the latest navigation data, information
on individual special destinations may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not be
in operation.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is shown on
the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
Repeating a spoken instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
until the desired volume is set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
Seite 151
Destination guidance Navigation
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 153.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the func‐
tion bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destination.
Display traffic bulletins.
Open the interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1.
Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The entire route between the current lo‐
cation and the destination is displayed on the
map.
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
Seite 152
Navigation Destination guidance
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
4. "Settings"
5. To set the map view:
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
▷ "Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images are displayed at scales of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins, refer to page 154.
Symbols for the special destinations are no
longer displayed.
Map view for splitscreen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
▷ "Map direction of travel"
▷ "Map view with perspective"
▷ "Position"
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
ways are displayed three dimensionally.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins
At a glance
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
Seite 153
Destination guidance Navigation
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
censed material (including, without limita‐
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
particular purpose, or those arising from a
course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
dental damages (including, without limita‐
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
tial damages, so those particular limitations
may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area
are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Opening the list of traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route
are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
garded in this setting. Symbols and special des‐
tinations are not displayed.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Seite 154
Navigation Destination guidance
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
calculated route.
▷ Red: traffic congestion
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
▷ Green: clear roads
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road
construction
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the
map.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired category.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
den.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
General information
Detour suggestions from the navigation system
can be manually accepted when using semi-dy‐
namic destination guidance. When using dy‐
namic destination guidance, they are automati‐
cally accepted for route guidance.
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
The upper part of the message shows:
▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
sibly with the distance to the beginning of
the obstruction.
▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on the
route.
▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to the
traffic obstructions.
The lower part of the message shows:
▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
▷ Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.
▷ Time gained if the detour is taken compared
to the original route with the traffic obstruc‐
tions.
Both the original route, shown in white, and the
detour are displayed on the split screen.
Accepting the detour
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Seite 155
Destination guidance Navigation
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Seite 156
Navigation Destination guidance
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
What to do if...
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined. Input any street in the se‐
lected city and start destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as close
as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 157
What to do if... Navigation
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 160
Entertainment Tone
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Multi-channel playback,
surround
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
played.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐
ting.
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 161
Tone Entertainment
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Radio
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Controls
1 Volume, on/off
2 Change wave band
3 Change entertainment sources
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the station
Turn the controller and press it
or
Press the button
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 12.
Storing a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Seite 162
Entertainment Radio
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a station
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to be
displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list of
current stations and stored stations.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band.
Switching the RDS on/off
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Seite 163
Radio Entertainment
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it
may take several seconds for the station to be
played back in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
tist.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted.
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
Seite 164
Entertainment Radio
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via the iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the button on the radio
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
Seite 165
Radio Entertainment
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Seite 166
Entertainment Radio
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 seconds
"Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
Seite 167
Radio Entertainment
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages; next to tall buildings;
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
Seite 168
Entertainment Radio
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 169
Radio Entertainment
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Controls
1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change the entertainment source
5 Change station/track
6 Programmable memory buttons
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
CD/DVD
Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or a
CD is located in the CD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
... CD changer
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video.
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A.
Seite 170
Entertainment CD/multimedia
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate di‐
rection as often as necessary until the
desired track is played back.
Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1.
Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Seite 171
CD/multimedia Entertainment
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all
tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the Control Dis‐
play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
some countries, it is only displayed while the
handbrake is set or the automatic transmission
is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
Video menu
To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open DVD menu
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Seite 172
Entertainment CD/multimedia
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Symbol Function
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.
DVD menu
1.
If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
Seite 173
CD/multimedia Entertainment
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1.
Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1.
"Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD changer
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located un‐
der a cover in the side trim on the left side of the
cargo area.
Removing the CD magazine
To fill or empty the CD magazine, remove it from
the CD changer:
1.
Push the cover aside, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
Seite 174
Entertainment CD/multimedia
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The CD magazine is ejected.
Wait at least 2 seconds before sliding the mag‐
azine back in to ensure that the inserted CDs can
be read in.
Filling/emptying the CD magazine
When filling or emptying the CD magazine, only
touch the CDs at the edge; do not touch the re‐
flective scanning surface.
Filling:
Insert one CD per compartment with the printed
side up.
Emptying:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting the CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine all the way in the di‐
rection of the arrow, arrow 1, and close the
cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the in‐
serted CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback.
Seite 175
CD/multimedia Entertainment
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data
creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
patents granted and registered in the USA and
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
rights reserved.
Music collection
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
formats are stored. Individual tracks and di‐
rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
track and directory, refer to page 180.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
disc.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
Seite 176
Entertainment CD/multimedia
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
Seite 177
CD/multimedia Entertainment
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
▷ File systems: standard file systems for USB
devices are supported. The FAT 32 format
is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 120.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 179.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry.
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Seite 178
Entertainment CD/multimedia
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Music search by voice
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
Seite 179
CD/multimedia Entertainment
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Seite 180
Entertainment CD/multimedia
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 120.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center console.
Seite 181
CD/multimedia Entertainment
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Connect the headphone connector or line-out
connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices"
4. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/music interface for
smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
page 202, when equipped with the music
interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.
Connecting
The USB audio interface is in the center console.
Seite 182
Entertainment CD/multimedia
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐
ing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
The CD cover belonging to the track may appear
on the Control Display after several seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
Seite 183
CD/multimedia Entertainment
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
played.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
At a glance
Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol Display up to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only dis‐
played if the handbrake is set or if the automatic
transmission is in position P.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the directory if necessary.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
back.
Video menu
Symbol Function
Next video file
Previous video file
Double-click on an icon to play back
previous video file.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
Seite 184
Entertainment CD/multimedia
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 194.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
page 193, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
to the device operating instructions: for in‐
stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device display.
Seite 185
CD/multimedia Entertainment
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
You are prompted by the iDrive or device to
enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 187.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐
tooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting the device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
Seite 186
Entertainment CD/multimedia
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
essary.
Playback menu
Depending on the particular device, some of the
functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Unpairing a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable devices can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 192.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
▷ Perform a software update, refer to
page 188, if needed.
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via a charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
Seite 187
CD/multimedia Entertainment
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
vice off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Music files can only be played back softly.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed
or by other messages on the device.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 187, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Software Update
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With
a software update, the vehicle can support new
mobile phones or new external device, for ex‐
ample.
▷ USB.
Software updates and related current infor‐
mation is available at www.bmw.com/up‐
date.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Select desired version to display additional in‐
formation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
1.
Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB audio
interface in the center console. An update
via the USB interface in the glove compart‐
ment is not possible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
The software version prior to the last software
update can be restored.
The previous version can only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Software update"
Seite 188
Entertainment CD/multimedia
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
Seite 189
CD/multimedia Entertainment
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle
and can then be operated via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
are described in the following. Operating the au‐
dio functions, refer to page 185.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the
mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
tooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which mo‐
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
this may lead to a malfunction.
A software update, refer to page 188, can be
performed if necessary.
Seite 192
Communication Telephone
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐
phone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 185.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 192.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 192, that sup‐
port this function.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
6. "OK"
An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional te‐
lephone.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 196. While a call is
active on the additional telephone, received
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 193
Telephone Communication
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Pairing and connecting a mobile phone
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle
display with the control number on the mo‐
bile phone display. Confirm the control num‐
ber on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con‐
nected with the vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 195.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone be‐
fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
when it is reconnected. These functions are de‐
activated in a mobile phone that is already con‐
nected.
Seite 194
Communication Telephone
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Configuring the mobile phone
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function has already been assigned to an‐
other connected mobile phone, the function is
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mobile
phone is unpaired when the function is assigned
to a new mobile phone.
Swapping the telephone and additional
telephone
The function of the telephone and additional te‐
lephone can be swapped automatically.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing the mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐
paired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 192.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and
connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
Seite 195
Telephone Communication
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or low?
Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme
environmental conditions.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone book
entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e. g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
Customer Relations or the service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
Seite 196
Communication Telephone
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to one of the telephones is au‐
tomatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
or
1.
"Telephone"
2. "End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
Seite 197
Telephone Communication
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Seite 198
Communication Telephone
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network, or Service
Request is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐
lect the required contact. The connection is be‐
ing established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1.
Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed.
The sorting order of the phone numbers de‐
pends on the particular mobile phone.
Dialing the number via the iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
ber if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1.
"Telephone"
Seite 199
Telephone Communication
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
ular mobile phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Voice operation
General information
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐
tem: operation, refer to page 25.
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
bile phone can be voice operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration.
The concept
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.
Seite 200
Communication Telephone
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice operation system.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button on the steering wheel.
›Help‹.
Possible commands are announced.
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Example: dialing a phone number
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number«.
3. For instance, ›123 456 790‹
The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
«.
4. ›Dial‹
The system says: »Dialing number«.
Calling
Dialing a phone number
1. ›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Correcting the phone number
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
essary.
Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialing
›Redial‹
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Saving an entry
1.
›Save name‹
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Deleting an entry
1.
›Delete name‹
Seite 201
Telephone Communication
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
Deleting all entries
1. ›Delete phone book‹
2. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
3. Confirm the prompt again: ›Yes‹
Reading and selecting entries
1. ›Read phonebook‹
2. When the desired entry is read aloud:
say ›Dial number‹
Selecting an entry
1.
›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob during an announcement.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer‐
gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice
and vocal pitch can change. This can unneces‐
sarily delay the establishment of a telephone
connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 253, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
be changed in the Control Display.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Snap-in adapter
General information
More information on compatible snap-in adapt‐
ers that support the functions of the mobile
phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
1.
Press button 1 and remove the cover.
Seite 202
Communication Telephone
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐
ton 1.
Inserting the mobile phone
1.
Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts and
press it down until it engages.
The battery is charged beginning with the radio
ready state of the vehicle.
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 203
Telephone Communication
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Office
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stan‐
dards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
fice.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 72, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
stance to correctly display appointments.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 193.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Seite 204
Communication Office
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Contacts
Note
Equipment version with the mobile phone prep‐
aration package.
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers
can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 23.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
cle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Seite 205
Office Communication
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
5. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
may differ from the selected sorting order.
Seite 206
Communication Office
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
not be deleted.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"
Messages
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone to
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐
tional telephone are not transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered if more than one
type of message exists.
1.
"Filter:"
2. Select the type of message.
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
displayed.
▷ "Service message"
Only messages from the BMW Assist
Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
played.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Seite 207
Office Communication
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted.
Delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1.
Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 211.
My Info
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired num‐
ber from the list. The connection is
established.
Message from the Concierge service
Storing an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
Seite 208
Communication Office
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Symbol Function
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired num‐
ber from the list. The connection is
established.
"Further information"
Display additional information.
E-mail
Displaying e-mails
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
result in charges.
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the email from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 211.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1.
Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1.
Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Seite 209
Office Communication
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 211.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1.
"Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1.
Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
1.
Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 211.
Notes
Displaying notes
1.
"Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1.
Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 211.
Reading the note out loud
Read the note out loud, refer to page 211.
Seite 210
Communication Office
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
displayed.
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected.
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during read‐
ing:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 192.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
Seite 211
Office Communication
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 212
Communication Office
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Note
Equipment version without the mobile phone
preparation package.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
New contact
1.
"Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.
In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid‐
ance is possible for all addresses.
6. If necessary, "Store".
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1.
"Contacts"
Seite 213
Contacts Communication
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 23.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Editing a contact
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Deleting contacts
1.
"My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 214
Communication Contacts
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services,
e.g., transmission of the position data of your
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if
an Emergency Request has been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a
service center. After the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a service center after you sign a
new contract.
Requirements
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit‐
ting the services.
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your service center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
must have been completed.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as‐
sistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit‐
ted to your service center, either automati‐
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
ample, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
mine its position.
▷ In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
and information for route planning, traffic,
and weather. A limited number of calls can
be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
Seite 215
ConnectedDrive Communication
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
phone that has been recommended by
BMW for TeleService and that is configured
for mobile data communication must be
connected with the vehicle.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Using TeleService
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
vehicle.
Even if the TeleServices are not active, a voice
contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible.
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.
Concierge service
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Messages
Information on messages, refer to page 207.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 77.
Seite 216
Communication ConnectedDrive
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Starting Roadside Assistance without
BMW Assist or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Starting Roadside Assistance with
BMW Assist or TeleService
General information
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
BMW Online
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW On‐
line.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Online
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Online home page is displayed.
Seite 217
ConnectedDrive Communication
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Operating BMW Online
To start a search:
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 77.
Automatic Service Request
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
Seite 218
Communication ConnectedDrive
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Services status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer
During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
software applications are displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
ports the software applications of Apps.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
cell phone and ready to use.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part
of Apps.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available
software applications and their installation can
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in danger
because of the distraction from driving.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
Seite 219
ConnectedDrive Communication
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Operating Apps
1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. They can be op‐
erated via iDrive.
1.
Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell
phone functions to a higher level or back.
Press button twice to switch back to the
main menu.
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of
installed software applications on the mo‐
bile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
can last some time. Some software applica‐
tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.
▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐
ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
free system.
If necessary, restart the software application
on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
tion.
Seite 220
Communication ConnectedDrive
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Seite 221
ConnectedDrive Communication
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range of
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀
Observe when handling fuel
▷ Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations
when handling fuel.
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Seite 224
Mobility Refueling
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
can be released manually:
1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side
panel at the rear and remove it.
2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol
out of the holder toward the front and pull.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, es‐
caping fuel may harm the environment or dam‐
age the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of per‐
sonal injury and property damage.◀
Fuel tank capacity
X1 sDrive28i: approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters.
X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i: approx. 16.6 US gal/
63 liters.
Seite 225
Refueling Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Fuel quality
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump
as containing metals.
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline without
metal additives
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other
components will be permanently damaged.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,
i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable
standard.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
Recommended fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the specified
minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not
run properly.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
— for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 226
Mobility Fuel
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Seite 227
Fuel Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐
sure.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 90, or
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 88.
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
approved and tire brands recommended by
BMW; a list of these is available from your serv‐
ice center.
For correct identification of the right tire inflation
pressures, observe the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ad‐
just pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed
The maximum permissible speed for these tire
pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h Do not exceed
this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents could occur.◀
Seite 228
Mobility Wheels and tires
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the fol‐
lowing pages in the column for traveling speeds
including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/
h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
occur.◀
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could oc‐
cur.
Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive 28i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.8/41
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.4/35
-
-
2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.8/41
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
Seite 229
Wheels and tires Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.9/42
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.4/35
-
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.9/42
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.6/38 3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
Seite 230
Mobility Wheels and tires
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
2.8/41
-
-
3.1/45
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive 28i/X1 xDrive 35i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.8/41
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.4/35
-
-
2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.8/41
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature
Seite 231
Wheels and tires Mobility
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
2.4/35 2.9/42
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.6/38 3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with
cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
2.6/38 3.0/44
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
2.8/41 3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC
2.8/41
-
-
3.0/44
Seite 232
Mobility Wheels and tires
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC
3.0/44
-
-
3.2/46
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 17 103 M
Speeds of up to 50 mph/
80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V
225: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
DOT xxxx xxx 1012
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1012: tire age
Tire age
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
tire identification mark: DOT ... 1012 means that
the tire was manufactured in the week 10 of
2012.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.◀
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
Seite 233
Wheels and tires Mobility
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
page 236.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than
summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Seite 234
Mobility Wheels and tires
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
road damage and similar situations.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
obtained from the service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the
Seite 235
Wheels and tires Mobility
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your service center
will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible when using
different types of tires.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
Seite 236
Mobility Wheels and tires
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Driving with a damaged tire:
▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 88
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 90
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your service center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 95.
Seite 237
Wheels and tires Mobility
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Coolant expansion tank 242
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid for the headlamp
and window washer system 61
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding en‐
gine oil
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 238
Mobility Engine compartment
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the
window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Lift the hood all the way.
3. Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing the hood
Drop the hood from a height of ap‐
prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to en‐
gage.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Engine oil
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
driving style, for example, results in considerably
higher engine oil consumption.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the engine oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.
Requirements
▷ The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
6.2 miles/10 km.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Display in the instrument cluster
1.
Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro‐
Seite 239
Engine compartment Mobility
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
priate symbol appears in the display, ac‐
companied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis‐
played.
Possible displays
Symbol Function
Oil level OK.
Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes
if the car is at a standstill on a
level surface, or about 5 mi‐
nutes while the car is on the
move.
Oil at minimum level:
Add a maximum quantity of
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil,
refer to page 241, at the next
opportunity.
Symbol Function
Oil level is too high.
Overfilling oil damages the en‐
gine. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil.
It is possible to continue driv‐
ing. Note the newly calculated
remaining mileage until the
next oil service, refer to
page 75. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Seite 240
Mobility Engine compartment
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer
also to Adding engine oil below.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
service, refer to page 75. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of
oil only after a corresponding message appears
on the Control Display.
Add oil promptly
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes
No oil additives
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.◀
Viscosity classes of engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐
ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or
malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information on approved oil types can be
obtained from the service center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be used:
Gasoline engine
API SM or a higher quality standard
Seite 241
Engine compartment Mobility
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by the serv‐
ice center only.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Checking the coolant level
1.
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres‐
sure to escape; then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environmen‐
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.
Seite 242
Mobility Engine compartment
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system provides information
on required maintenance measures and thus
provides support in maintaining road safety and
the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 75, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
On the Control Display, the remaining distances
and times for selected maintenance require‐
ments and any legally required deadlines can be
displayed individually, refer to page 75.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 73; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS
Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Seite 243
Maintenance Mobility
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐
ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
sions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Display of the previously described mal‐
functions on Canadian models.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a short time.
Seite 244
Mobility Maintenance
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Tool kit
The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel
and storage compartment in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Front
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 61.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech‐
anism toward the front.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order,
making sure it engages.
Risk of damage
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the
window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Seite 245
Replacing components Mobility
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Rear
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech‐
anism toward the front.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them
or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls, displays and other equipment in
your vehicle.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1
light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you
drive with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamps do not need to be changed.
If the condensation in the headlamps does not
evaporate after trips with the lights switched on,
and the amount of moisture in the headlamps
increases, for example if water droplets form,
have them checked by your service center.
Seite 246
Mobility Replacing components
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Removing the headlamp cover
The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the
engine compartment, and the low beam and turn
signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding cover
in the wheel arch.
1 High beam cover
2 Low beam cover
3 Turn signal bulb socket
To remove the covers:
▷ High beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4,
and take the cover out of the guide.
▷ Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5.
Attach the covers carefully
When attaching the covers, proceed care‐
fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐
age to the headlamp system.◀
Proceed in reverse order when attaching the
covers.
Access via the wheel arch
For low beams and turn signals only:
1.
Turn the wheel inward.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch. To
open the locks, turn them counterclockwise
all the way using a coin, for example.
Halogen headlamps
Low beams and high beams
Wear protective goggles and gloves
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,
there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐
dentally damaged during replacement.◀
The low beams and high beams have separate
covers.
H7 bulb, 55 watt
1.
Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the
wheel arch, refer to page 247.
3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to
page 247.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the
anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2.
Seite 247
Replacing components Mobility
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
6. Remove the bulb.
7. Insert the new bulb.
8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.
9. Plug in the connector.
10. Reattach the cover.
11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the
wheel arch.
Parking and roadside parking lamps
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
page 247.
3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.
4. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the bulb socket.
6. Reattach the cover.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
H8 bulb, 35 watt
1.
Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
page 247.
3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90˚, see arrow, and
pull it out.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
6. Reattach the cover.
Seite 248
Mobility Replacing components
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch, re‐
fer to page 247.
3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left
and remove it.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and turn
it all the way to the right.
6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 246.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors use LED
technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lamps
The tail lamps consist of two parts. One part is
in the tailgate and the other is in the fender.
P21W bulbs, 21 watt
1 Backup lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp LED
3 Brake lamp
4 Turn signal
5 Inner brake lamp
If bulb 2 is defective, please contact the service
center.
Lamps in fender
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
1.
Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Press the cover out of the rear cargo area
side trim and remove it.
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing
down the upper clip, arrow 1.
Seite 249
Replacing components Mobility
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
On the right side, take the button with the
fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward
the front if necessary.
4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take
out the bulb holder.
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
7. Replace the cover.
Inside brake lamps in the tailgate
1.
Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Take the warning triangle out of the bracket,
refer to page 254.
3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel, ar‐
rows.
4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down‐
ward.
5. Push out the handle for opening manually in
the event of an electrical malfunction, refer
to page 36, insert it through the opening,
and take off the panel.
6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see ar‐
rows, and remove it.
7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐
ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
9. Insert the handle for opening manually
through the tailgate panel opening and
press it in.
10. Reattach the tailgate panel.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
to page 236, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately in
the event of a puncture.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Seite 250
Mobility Replacing components
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the battery.◀
General information
Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to
achieve the full battery life.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in the
following cases:
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to drive
short distances.
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for
more than one month.
Starting aid terminals
Only charge using the starting aid terminals, re‐
fer to page 255, in the engine compartment
while the engine is switched off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
again, refer to page 47.
▷ Time: update, refer to page 72.
▷ Date: update, refer to page 73.
▷ Radio station: save again, refer to page 162.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
system to be operational.
▷ Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be pos‐
sible to raise the roof. Have the system ini‐
tialized by the service center.
▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
page 112.
▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
as you drive. During this time, indicator
lamps light up. If the lamps do not disappear
during the current trip, have the system
checked.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Seite 251
Replacing components Mobility
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Access to fuse box:
1.
Open the glove compartment.
2. Release the damper from the bottom holder
by applying pressure toward the front, ar‐
row 1.
3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing
on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.
A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the current
distributor.
Information on the fuses can be found on the
back of the cover.
Spare fuses are available from the service cen‐
ter.
Seite 252
Mobility Replacing components
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button for the hazard warning system is lo‐
cated on the center console.
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn sig‐
nal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn
signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in
the appropriate position and will be difficult to
detect.◀
Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ Radio readiness is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
Seite 253
Breakdown assistance Mobility
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 216,
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
connection to Roadside Assistance can be es‐
tablished directly.
Warning triangle
On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press
on the tab, arrow.
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ment on the right side in the cargo area.
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any items promptly.
Seite 254
Mobility Breakdown assistance
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
is a danger of shorting.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal. Pull the cover up and off.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting jumper cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
Seite 255
Breakdown assistance Mobility
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.◀
No additional passengers
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.◀
Automatic transmission, 8-gear:
transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Towing your vehicle
Observe before towing your vehicle
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to
control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
Automatic transmission, 6-gear
Selector lever in position N.
Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Do not exceed a towing speed of
40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmission
can occur.◀
Seite 256
Mobility Breakdown assistance
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Being towed
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle
damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and steer‐
ing.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow truck
sDrive
Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.
Seite 257
Breakdown assistance Mobility
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
xDrive
Towing a vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case could
be damaged.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover and storage compartment in the cargo
area, refer to page 245.
It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor
cover in the cargo area, refer to page 245.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover
is pushed out at the top edge and can be pulled
out.
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 258
Mobility Breakdown assistance
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Care
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park
Distance Control or the backup camera, for in‐
stance, for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 60,
to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
▷ Move the rear window wiper to its resting
position, deactivate it, and protect it against
damage. Ask the car wash operator about
any necessary protective measures.
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
are taken.
Automatic transmission
1.
Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage the selector lever or transmission
position N.
3. Release the handbrake, refer to page 58.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Seite 259
Care Mobility
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis‐
sion position P is engaged automatically.
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes.
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Fully remove an residue from the windows; oth‐
erwise, streaking may occur when the wind‐
shield wipers are activated, impairing your view
and causing wiper noise.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency
and extent of your car care to these influences.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
the paintwork.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Seite 260
Mobility Care
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
No chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again when they are returned after being re‐
moved, such as for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
When returning the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slipping.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Seite 261
Care Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 262
Mobility Care
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Seite 263
Care Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
Dimensions
1 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors:
70.8 inches/1,798 mm
2 Vehicle height: 60.8 inches/1,545 mm
3 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 81 in‐
ches/2,058 mm
4 Wheelbase: 108.7 inches/2,760 mm
5 Vehicle length: 176.5 inches/4,484 mm
Seite 266
Reference Technical data
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
6 Tailgate opening height: 80.0 inches/
2,031 mm
Smallest turning circle dia.: 37 ft/11.3 m, with
xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m.
Height with roof antenna: 62 in/1,573 mm
Weights
X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle
weight
lbs/kg 4,497/2,040 4,707/2,135 4,861/2,205
Load lbs/kg 904/410 904/410 904/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,326/1,055 2,425/1,100
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,546/1,155 2,590/1,175 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 25.0-56.0/420‐
1,350
25.0-56.0/420‐
1,350
25.0-56.0/420-
1,350
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank Fuel specifications, refer to
page 226
X1 sDrive28i US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61
X1 xDrive28i, X1 xDrive35i US gal/liters approx. 16.6/63
Window washer system
With headlamp washer sys‐
tem
US qt/liters approx. 6.3/6 Details, refer to page 61
Seite 267
Technical data Reference
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Short commands for voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands apply to vehicles
equipped with a voice activation system. They
have no function in vehicles in which only the
mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Seite 268
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city. ›City‹
Enter the country. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Seite 269
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Function Command
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale
100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map
scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale
5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Seite 270
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,
split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,
93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Seite 271
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Function Command
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐
quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite
radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 272
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen. ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Seite 273
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Seite 274
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹
Open ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹
Seite 275
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 94
Accident, refer to Emergency
Request, initiating 253
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 77
Activated charcoal filter with
automatic climate con‐
trol 108
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 93
Adaptive light control 81
Additional telephone 192
Additives, coolant 242
Additives, engine oil 241
After washing vehicle 260
Airbags 85
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 88
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated air mode 107
Air conditioning mode
–
Automatic climate con‐
trol 105
– Ventilation 108
Air distribution
–
Automatic 106
– Manual 106
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 107
Air flow rate 106
Airing, refer to Ventilation 108
Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐
tion pressure 228
Air supply
–
Automatic climate con‐
trol 105
– Ventilation 108
Air vents
–
Refer to Ventilation 108
Alarm system 38
Alarm system
– Avoiding unintentional
alarms 39
– Ending an alarm 39
– Interior motion sensor 39
– Tilt alarm sensor 39
All around the headliner 17
ALL program 107
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 236
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 96
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 111
AM/FM station 162
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 151
Antifreeze, coolant 242
Antifreeze, washer fluid 61
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 94
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control
DSC 94
Anti-theft protection 32
Appointments 209
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 267
Approved engine oils 241
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 267
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 120
Arrival time, refer to Com‐
puter 70
Ashtray 114
Assist 215
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 254
Assistance with driving off, re‐
fer to Drive-off assistant 97
Assistance with starting en‐
gine, refer to Jump-start‐
ing 255
Audio device, external 121
Audio playback 171
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 185
Automatic
– Air distribution 106
– Air flow rate 106
Automatic car wash 259
Automatic climate control
–
Automatic air distribu‐
tion 106
Automatic, cruise control 98
Automatic Curb Monitor 48
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function 56
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 80, 81
Automatic recirculated air
control 107
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62, 64
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
–
Interlock 62
– Kickdown 63, 64
– Overriding selector lever
lock 64
AUTO program with automatic
climate control 106
AUX-IN port 121, 181
Average fuel consumption 70
Average fuel consumption
–
Setting the units 72
Average speed 70
Average speed, refer to Com‐
puter 70
Seite 276
Reference Everything from A to Z
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 267
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Backrests, refer to Seats 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats
– Adjusting the backrest
tilt 115
Backup camera 102
Backup camera, cleaning 104
Backup camera, obstacle
marking 103
Backup camera, pathway
lines 103
Backup camera, turning
lines 103
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 249
Balance 160
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 254
Bass 160
Battery
–
Remote control 30
Battery disposal 251
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐
tery 251
Battery replacement, remote
control for vehicle 38
Before entering the car
wash 259
Belts, refer to Safety belts 45
Belt tensioners, refer to Safety
belts 45
Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 122
Black and white map dis‐
play 154
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 106
Bluetooth audio 185
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating 193
BMW Apps 219
BMW Apps, video play‐
back 184
BMW Assist 215
BMW Assist, refer to Connec‐
tedDrive 215
BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
to Saving fuel 133
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 243
BMW Online 217
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 122
Brake assistant 94
Brake discs, breaking in 126
Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐
quirements 75
Brake force display 93
Brake force distribution, elec‐
tronic 94
Brake lamps
–
Bulb replacement 249
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 93
Brake lights, adaptive 93
Brake pads, breaking in 126
Brakes
–
Handbrake 58
Brakes, BMW maintenance
system 243
Brakes, service require‐
ments 75
Brake system, BMW mainte‐
nance system 243
Braking, notes 127
Breakdown assistance 254
Breakdown, transporting the
vehicle 256
Breaking in 126
Brightness on the Control Dis‐
play 75
Bulb replacement, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 246
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 54
C
Calendar 209
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, care 261
Camera, refer to Backup cam‐
era 102
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 122
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 251
Car care products 260
Care 259
Care, displays 262
Care, vehicle 260
Cargo 130
Cargo area 115
Cargo area
–
Comfort Access 37
– Cover 115
– Folding up the cargo floor
panel 118
– Multi-function hook 118
– Partition net 116
Cargo area, capacities 267
Cargo area, enlarging 115
Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 84
Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐
gate 35
Cargo area net, refer to Parti‐
tion net 116
Cargo area, opening from the
inside 35
Cargo area, opening from the
outside 36
Cargo floor panel
–
Folding up 118
Cargo floor panel, raising 118
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 131
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 30
Seite 277
Everything from A to Z Reference
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Carpet, care 261
Car phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 120
Car phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 192
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐
ing, refer to Connecting elec‐
trical devices 114
Car wash 259
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 126
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 243
CD/DVD 170
CD/DVD notes 175
CD changer 174
CDs, storing 176
Cell phone 192
Cell phone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 120
Center armrest, front 120
Center armrest, rear 121
Center brake lamp, bulb re‐
placement 250
Center console, refer to
Around the center con‐
sole 16
Central locking
–
Comfort Access 36
– From the inside 34
– Setting the unlocking char‐
acteristics 32
Central locking system
–
From the outside 31
– Principle 31
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing wheels/tires 235
Check Control 77
Children, transporting 50
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 51
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tems 50
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 50
Child safety locks 53
Child seat, mounting 50
Child seats, refer to Transport‐
ing children safely 50
Chrome parts, care 261
Cigarette lighter, connecting
electrical devices 114
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 114
Cigarette lighter socket 114
Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
circulated air mode 107
Cleaning, displays 262
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 259
Clock 68
Clock
–
12h/24h format 73
– Setting the time and date 73
Closing
–
From the inside 34
– From the outside 32
Clothes hooks 122
Cockpit 12
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 55
Combination instrument, refer
to Instrument cluster 14
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signal/high beams/
headlamp flasher 59
Combination switch, refer to
Washer/wiper system 59
Comfort Access
–
Battery replacement 38
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 16
Compact wheel, inflation pres‐
sure 228
Compartment for remote con‐
trol, refer to Ignition lock 54
Compartment in floor 118
Compartments, refer to Stor‐
age compartments 120, 121
Compass, digital 112
Computer 70
Computer, displaying informa‐
tion 70
Computer, displays on the
Control Display 70
Concierge service 216
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 128
Condition Based Service
CBS 243
Confirmation signals for lock‐
ing/unlocking the vehicle 33
ConnectedDrive 215
Connecting, mobile phone, re‐
fer to Pairing the mobile
phone 193
Consumption, refer to Aver‐
age fuel consumption 70
Contacts 205, 213
Control Display 18
Control Display, care 262
Control Display, settings 74
Controller 19
Controls and displays 12
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 94
Convenient operation
–
Glass sunroof 32
– Window 32
Coolant 242
Coolant, checking the
level 242
Coolant temperature 69
Cooling function, switching on
and off 107
Cooling, maximum 106
Cooling system, refer to Cool‐
ant 242
Corrosion on brake discs 128
Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 84
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 202
Seite 278
Reference Everything from A to Z
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Cruise control 98
Cruise control
– Malfunction 99
Cupholder 122
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 267
Current fuel consumption 69
Current location, storing 142
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive
light control 81
D
Dashboard lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 83
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Data, technical 266
Date
–
Date format 74
– Setting 73
Daytime running lights 81
Daytime running lights, bulb
replacement 248
Defroster
–
Rear window 107
Destination entry via the ad‐
dress book 142
Destination guidance 149
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 147
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 140
Digital clock 68
Digital compass 112
Digital radio 163
Dimming mirrors 49
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 59
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 83
Displays and controls 12
Displays, care 262
Displays, cleaning 262
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 14
Disposal, coolant 242
Disposal, vehicle battery 251
Distance warning, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 100
Divided rear seat backrest, re‐
fer to Enlarging the cargo
area 115
Divided screen view, split
screen 22
Door key, refer to Remote con‐
trol with integrated key 30
Door lock 34
Doors, manual operation 34
Doors, unlocking and locking
–
Confirmation signals 33
– From the inside 34
– From the outside 32
DOT Quality Grades 233
Downhill control 96
Draft-free ventilation 108
Drive-off assistant 97
Driving away on inclines, refer
to Drive-off assistant 97
Driving notes, breaking in 126
Driving notes, general 126
Driving on poor roads 128
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 94
Driving through water 127
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 126
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
tion 107
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 94
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 95
DTMF suffix dialing 198
DVD/CD 170
DVDs, storing 176
DVD, video 172
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 156
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 94
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 95
E
ECO PRO 134
ECO PRO display 134
ECO PRO driving mode 134
ECO PRO mode 134
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 133
Electrical malfunction
– Door lock 34
– Driver's door 34
– Fuel filler flap 225
– Tailgate 36
Electric seat adjustment 44
Electronic brake-force distri‐
bution 94
Electronic engine oil level
check 239
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control DSC 94
Emergency activation
–
Automatic transmission, re‐
fer to Overriding selector
lever lock 64
Emergency operation
–
Door lock, refer to Manual
operation 34
Emergency operation, fuel
filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 225
Emergency Request 253
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 254
Energy-conscious driving, re‐
fer to Current fuel consump‐
tion 69
Energy, saving
–
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function 56
Energy, saving, refer to Saving
fuel 133
Engine, breaking in 126
Engine compartment 238
Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐
ant 242
Engine oil, adding 241
Seite 279
Everything from A to Z Reference
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Engine oil, additives, refer to
Approved engine oils 241
Engine oil, alternative oil
types 241
Engine oil, BMW maintenance
system 243
Engine oil change intervals, re‐
fer to Service require‐
ments 75
Engine oil, checking the
level 239
Engine oil, filling capacity 267
Engine oil temperature 69
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 241
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 241
Engine, overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
Engine start, assistance 255
Engine, starting 55
Engine, starting
–
Comfort Access 36
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
button 54
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
button 54
Engine, switching off 55
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 84
Environmentally friendly driv‐
ing, refer to Current fuel con‐
sumption 69
Equalizer 160
Equipment, interior 110
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control DSC 94
Exchanging wheels/tires 235
Exhaust system 126
Exterior mirrors 48
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 48
Exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming 49
Exterior mirrors, automatic
heating 49
Exterior mirrors, folding in and
out 48
External audio device 121
External devices 181
External temperature dis‐
play 68
External temperature display
– Changing the unit of meas‐
ure 72
– On computer 72
External temperature warn‐
ing 68
Externel temperature dis‐
play 68
Eyes for securing cargo 131
F
Fader 160
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 77
False alarm
–
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 39
– Ending an alarm 39
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 45
Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Filling capacities 267
Filter
–
Refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter with au‐
tomatic climate control 108
Fine wood, care 261
First aid kit 254
Fitting for towing 258
Flashing when locking/unlock‐
ing 33
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
chains 237
Flat tire, run-flat tires 236
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Flat tire, warning lamp 89, 91
Flat tire, wheel change 250
Flooding, refer to Driving
through water 127
Floor carpet, care 261
Floor mats, care 261
FM/AM station 162
Fog lamps 83
Fog lamps, indicator lamp 83
Foldable rear seat back‐
rest 115
Foot brake 127
Footwell lamps, refer to Inte‐
rior lamps 84
For your own safety 6
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 96
Front airbags 85
Front fog lamps 83
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 88
Fuel 226
Fuel
–
Refer to Average fuel con‐
sumption 70
Fuel, additives 226
Fuel, average consump‐
tion 70
Fuel cap 224
Fuel cap, closing 224
Fuel consumption display
–
Average fuel consump‐
tion 70
Fuel consumption display,
current fuel consumption 69
Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
Current fuel consumption 69
Fuel filler flap, closing 224
Fuel filler flap, opening 224
Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
case of an electrical malfunc‐
tion 225
Fuel gauge 69
Fuel, saving 133
Fuel tank capacity, refer to Fill‐
ing capacities 267
Fuel tank contents, refer to
Filling capacities 267
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐
pacities 267
Seite 280
Reference Everything from A to Z
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Fuse 252
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Universal Garage Door
Opener 110
Gasoline 226
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Gasoline quality 226
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 151
Gear change
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 66
Gear change, via shift pad‐
dles 66
Gear display, automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 62
General driving notes 126
Glass sunroof, electric
–
Convenient operation 32
– Remote control 32
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 41
Glove compartment 120
Glove compartment
–
USB interface 120
Glove compartment, light‐
ing 120
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 138
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 267
H
Halogen headlamps
–
Bulb replacement 247
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 111
Hands-free microphone 16
Hazard warning sys‐
tem 16, 253
HDC Hill Descent Control 96
HD Radio 163
Head airbags 85
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 80, 81
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 81
Headlamp cover, remov‐
ing 247
Headlamp flasher 59, 82
Headlamp flasher, indicator
lamp 15
Headlamps 80
Headlamps
–
Bulb replacement 247
Headlamps, care 260
Headlamps, cleaning 60
Headlamps, cleaning, washer
fluid 62
Headliner 17
Head restraints 46
Head restraints
–
Adjusting the height 46
– Removing 47
Heating
–
Rear window 107
– Seats 45
Heating, mirrors 49
Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing
cargo 131
Height adjustment
–
Seats 43
Height, refer to Dimen‐
sions 266
High-beam Assistant 82
High beams 82
High beams
–
Bulb replacement 247
High beams/low beams, auto‐
matic, refer to High-beam
Assistant 82
High beams, indicator
lamp 15
High-pressure washers 259
Hill Descent Control HDC 96
Hill drive-off assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 97
Hills 128
Holder for beverages 122
Holder for remote control, re‐
fer to Ignition lock 54
Homepage 6
Hood 238
Hood, opening 238
Horn 12
Hot exhaust system 126
Hotline 218
House number, entering for
navigation 141
Hydraulic brake assistant 94
Hydroplaning 127
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 68
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 68
Identification marks, tires 233
Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 238
iDrive 18
iDrive
–
Changing settings 74
– Changing the date and
time 73
– Changing the language 74
– Changing the units of meas‐
ure and display format 72
– Setting the brightness 75
Ignition 54
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio ready state 54
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 54
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Ignition lock 54
Ignition, switched off 55
Ignition, switched on 54
Indication of a flat tire 89, 91
Indicator and warning
lamps 15
Seite 281
Everything from A to Z Reference
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 228
Information on the navigation
data 138
Initialization after power fail‐
ure 251
Initializing
– Compass, refer to Calibrat‐
ing 113
– Panoramic glass sunroof 42
– Refer to Setting the time and
date 73
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 88
Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 91
Inside brake lamps
–
Bulb replacement 250
Installation location, tele‐
phone 120
Instrument cluster 14
Instrument lighting 83
Instrument panel, refer to In‐
strument cluster 14
Instruments, refer to Cock‐
pit 12
Integrated key 30
Interactive map 145
Interior equipment 110
Interior lamps 84
Interior lamps
–
Remote control 32
Interior mirror 49
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming 49
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 112
Interior temperature, setting
–
Automatic climate con‐
trol 105
Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 62
Intermediate destinations 147
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 141
iPod/iPhone 182
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 251
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 251
Joystick, refer to Selector
lever 65
Jump-starting 255
K
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 30
Key, refer to Integrated key/re‐
mote control 30
Kickdown
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63, 64
Knee airbag 85
Knocking control 226
L
Label, run-flat tire 236
Lamp and bulb replacement,
lamp replacement 246
Lamps 80
Lamps, automatic headlamp
control 80, 81
Lamps, High-beam Assis‐
tant 82
Lamps, parking lamps/low
beams 80
Lamps, replacing, refer to
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 246
Language, changing on the
Control Display 74
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to
Safety belts 45
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 131
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 51
Leather, care 260
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 246
Length, refer to Dimen‐
sions 266
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 23
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 250
Light-alloy wheels, care 261
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 246
Lighter 114
Lighting
–
Instruments 83
– Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment 246
Lighting, vehicle, refer to
Lamps 80
Light switch 80
Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
Load 130
Loading 130
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 35
Locking
–
From the inside 35
– From the outside 32
– Setting the confirmation sig‐
nals 33
– Without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 36
Locking the vehicle
–
From the inside 34
– From the outside 32
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 53
Longlife oils, alternative oil
types 241
Longlife oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 241
Seite 282
Reference Everything from A to Z
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Low beams 80
Low beams
– Automatic 81
– Bulb replacement 247
Low beams, automatic 80
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 82
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Luggage rack
– Rear luggage rack 132
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 132
Lumbar support 44
M
Main inspection, refer to Serv‐
ice requirements 75
Maintenance 243
Maintenance, refer to Service
booklet
Maintenance, refer to Service
requirements 75
Maintenance require‐
ments 243
Maintenance system
BMW 243
Malfunction
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– Door lock 34
– Fuel filler flap 225
– Tailgate 36
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 77
Manual air distribution 106
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 63, 66
Manual operation
–
Door lock 34
– Driver's door 34
– Selector lever lock, auto‐
matic transmission 64
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 225
Map, destination entry 145
Map display in black and
white 154
Map in split screen 153
Map view 151
Marking on approved
tires 236
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Maximum cooling 106
Maximum speed, winter
tires 236
Medical kit, refer to First aid
kit 254
Memory, refer to Seat and mir‐
ror memory 47
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 19
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 153
Messages 207
Microfilter
–
With automatic climate con‐
trol 108
Minimum tread, tires 234
Mirror
–
Mirror memory, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 47
Mirrors 48
Mirrors
–
Automatic Curb Monitor 48
Mirrors, folding in and out 48
Mirrors, heating 49
Mirrors, interior mirror 49
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 127
Mobile phone, installation lo‐
cation, refer to Center arm‐
rest 120
Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
phone 192
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 50
MP3 player 181
Multimedia 170
Music collection 176
Music search 178
Music, storing 176
N
Navigation 138
Navigation data 138
Navigation data, updating 138
Navigation system
–
Destination entry by
voice 146
Neck restraints, refer to Head
restraints 46
Nets, refer to Storage com‐
partments 121
New wheels and tires 235
Notes 6, 210
Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
tion 108
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 244
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis 244
Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 226
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 226
Odometer 68
Office 204
Oil additives 241
Oil consumption 239
Oil level 239
Oil, refer to Engine oil 239
Oil types, alternative 241
Oil types, approved 241
Old batteries, disposal 251
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 244
Seite 283
Everything from A to Z Reference
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 245
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 36
– From the inside 34
– From the outside 32
– Using the door lock 34
– Using the remote control 32
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Outside-air mode
– Automatic climate con‐
trol 107
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐
lated air mode 107
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
P
Paint, vehicle 260
Pairing, mobile phone 193
Panic mode 33
Panoramic glass sunroof
–
Convenient operation 32
– Initializing 42
– Opening, closing 41
– Pinch protection 42
– Power failure 42
– Remote control 32
– Tilting 41
Park Distance Control
PDC 100
Parked-car ventilation 108
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 128
Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 100
Parking assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 100
Parking brake, refer to Hand‐
brake 58
Parking lamps 80
Parking lamps/low beams 80
Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 248
Passenger airbags, deactivat‐
ing 86
Passenger side mirror, tilt‐
ing 48
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 100
Performance Control 96
Personal information 204
Personal Profile 30
Pinch protection
– Panoramic glass sunroof 42
– Windows 40
Plastic, care 261
PlugIn 220
Pollen
–
Refer to Microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter with au‐
tomatic climate control 108
Poor road operation 128
Position, storing 142
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 141
Power windows
–
Safety switch 41
Power windows, opening and
closing 40
Power windows, refer to Win‐
dows 40
Prescribed engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 241
Pressure, tires 228
Pressure warning, tires 88
Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
mum tread depth 234
Profile, tires 234
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection
–
Panoramic glass sunroof 42
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection
–
Windows 40
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐
ant 242
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 30
Radio ready state 54
Radio ready state, switched
off 55
Radio ready state, switched
on 54
Radio setting, refer to Radio
ready state 54
Rain sensor 60
Random 171
Random playback 171
Range 70
RDS 163
Reading lamps 84
Reading out loud 211
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 249
Rear seat backrest
–
Foldable 115
Rear seats
–
Adjusting the backrest
tilt 115
– Adjusting the head re‐
straints 47
– Folding down 115
– Folding down the back‐
rests 115
Rear socket 114
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
rors 48
Rear window defroster 107
Rear window, washing 61
Rear window wiper 61
Recirculated air mode 107
Recommended tire
brands 236
Redialing 199
Refueling 224
Remaining distance to desti‐
nation, refer to Computer 70
Seite 284
Reference Everything from A to Z
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Remaining range for service,
refer to Service require‐
ments 75
Remaining range, refer to
Range 70
Reminders 211
Remote control
– Battery replacement 38
– Comfort Access 36
– Garage door opener 110
– Malfunction 33, 38
– Tailgate 33
– Universal 110
Remote control, removing
from the ignition lock 54
Remote control, service
data 243
Remote inquiry 198
Replacement fuse 252
Replacement remote con‐
trol 30
Replacing wheels/tires 235
Reporting safety defects 8
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
fer to Washer fluid reser‐
voir 62
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 91
Restraining systems
–
Refer to Safety belts 45
Restraint systems for chil‐
dren 50
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 131
Retreaded tires 236
Reverse gear
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
Road, avoiding 149
Road detour 149
Roadside Assistance 216
Roadside parking lamp
–
Bulb replacement 248
Roadside parking lamps 82
RON gasoline quality 226
RON, refer to Fuel quality 226
Roof load capacity 267
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 132
Rope, refer to Towing 257
Route 150
Route criteria, route 149
Route, displaying 150
Route section, bypassing 150
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 236
Rubber components,
care 261
Run-flat tires 236
Run-flat tires, tire inflation
pressure 228
Running lights, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 80
S
Safe braking 127
Safety 6
Safety belts 45
Safety belts
–
Damage 46
Safety belts, care 261
Safety belts, indicator/warning
lamp 46
Safety belts, reminder 46
Safety switch for rear win‐
dows 41
Safety systems
–
Safety belts 45
Safety systems, airbags 85
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 236
Satellite radio 164
Saving fuel 133
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 152
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Search, refer to BMW On‐
line 217
Seat adjustment
– Manual 43
Seat adjustment, electric 44
Seat and mirror memory 47
Seat belts
– Refer to Safety belts 45
Seat heating 45
Seats
– Adjusting 43
– Adjusting electrically 44
– Heating 45
– Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 47
– Sitting safely 43
– Storing the setting, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 47
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 62, 65
Selector lever lock, overrid‐
ing 64
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever po‐
sitions, Shiftlock 62
Selector lever lock, releas‐
ing 65
Selector lever positions, auto‐
matic transmission with
Steptronic 62
Sensors, care 261
Service and warranty 7
Service data in the remote
control 243
Service interval display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 243
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 75
Service requirements 75
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 243
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 254
Servotronic 97
Seite 285
Everything from A to Z Reference
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Settings
– Changing on the Control Dis‐
play 74
– Language 74
Settings and information 71
Settings, configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 30
Settings, DVD 173
Setting the clock, 12h/24h for‐
mat 73
Shifting
– Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion with Steptronic 66
Shift lever
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
Shift paddles 66
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 64
Short commands, voice acti‐
vation 268
Side airbags 85
Side windows, refer to Win‐
dows 40
Size, refer to Dimensions 266
Ski bag, refer to Ski and snow‐
board bag 119
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to
Panoramic glass sunroof 41
Slot for remote control 54
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 114
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 202
Snap-in adapter, refer to Stor‐
age compartment of center
armrest 120
Snow chains 237
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nosis 244
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 114
Software applications,
iPhone 219
Software part number 192
Software update 188
SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐
quest, initiating 253
Sound output 162, 170
Spare fuse 252
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 143
Special equipment, series
equipment 6
Speed, average 70
Speed limit 78
Speed limit, setting 79
Speedometer 14
Speed, with winter tires 236
Split screen 22
Split screen map settings 153
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 151
Sport program, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 63, 66
Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐
ing the windshield and head‐
lamps 60
Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐
shield washer nozzles 61
Stability control systems 94
Start/Stop button 54
Start/Stop button, starting the
engine 55
Start/Stop button, switching
off the engine 55
Starting the engine 55
Start problems, refer to Jump-
starting 255
State/province, selecting for
navigation 140
Stations, stored 168
Station, storing 162
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steam jets 259
Steering wheel 49
Steering wheel
–
Shift paddles 64
Steering wheel, adjusting 49
Steering wheel lock 54
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 62
Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
gram and manual mode M/
S 66
Stopping, engine 55
Storage compartment
nets 121
Storage compart‐
ments 120, 121
Storage, tires 236
Storing the seat position, refer
to Seat and mirror mem‐
ory 47
Storing the vehicle 262
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 141
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 228
Summer tires, tread 234
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12
Switching off, engine 55
Switching off, vehicle 55
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 109
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 69
Tailgate
–
Comfort Access 37
– Emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 36
– Opening from the inside 35
– Opening from the out‐
side 36
– Opening manually 36
– Remote control 33
Tail lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 250
Tail lamps 249
Tail lamps
–
Bulb replacement 249, 250
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel
gauge 69
Seite 286
Reference Everything from A to Z
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Tasks 210
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Technical data 266
Telephone 192
Telephone, adjusting the vol‐
ume 196
Telephone, installation loca‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐
rest 120
TeleService 216
Temperature
– Automatic climate con‐
trol 106
– Changing the unit of meas‐
ure 72
Temperature, coolant, refer to
Coolant temperature 69
Temperature display
–
External temperature 68
– External temperature warn‐
ing 68
– Setting the unit 72
Temperature, engine oil 69
Temperature warning 68
Text messages 207
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 38
Thigh support adjustment 44
Third brake lamp, refer to Cen‐
ter brake lamp 250
Tilting the passenger side mir‐
ror 48
Time
–
Setting the time 72
– Setting the time zone 73
Tire age 233
Tire identification marks 233
Tire inflation pressure 228
Tire inflation pressure, check‐
ing 228
Tire pressure monitor, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 88
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Tire Quality Grading 233
Tires
– Inflation pressure 228
Tires, breaking in 126
Tires, changing 235
Tires, condition 234
Tires, damage 235
Tire size 233
Tires, minimum tread 234
Tires, retreaded tires 236
Tires, run-flat tires 236
Tires, storage 236
Tire tread 234
Toll roads, route 149
Tone 160
Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 245
Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle
tool kit 245
Tow bar 257
Tow fitting 258
Towing 256
Towing another vehicle 256
Towing, being towed 256
Towing with automatic trans‐
mission 256
Town/city, navigation 141
Tow rope 257
Tow-starting 256, 258
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 90
Traction control 95
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 153
Transmission
–
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– Overriding selector lever lock
in case of automatic trans‐
mission with Steptronic 64
Transmission, automatic
transmission with Step‐
tronic 64
Transmission lock
–
Refer to Changing selector
lever positions 62
– Refer to P Park 63
Transmission positions, auto‐
matic transmission with
Steptronic 64
Transporting children
safely 50
Treble, tone 160
Trip computer, refer to Dis‐
plays on the Control Dis‐
play 70
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 68
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 59
Trip odometer 68
Trips, planning 147
Trunk, refer to Cargo
area 115
Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐
sions 266
Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐
tive light control 81
Turn signal
–
Indicator/warning lamp 14
Turn signals 59
Turn signals
–
Bulb replacement 249
– Bulb replacement, front 249
Turn signals, triple turn signal
activation 59
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQG 233
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐
ing 39
Units
–
Average fuel consump‐
tion 72
– Temperature 72
Units of measure, changing on
Control Display 72
Universal Garage Door
Opener 110
Universal remote control 110
Seite 287
Everything from A to Z Reference
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
Unlocking
– From the outside 32
– Setting the unlocking char‐
acteristics 32
– Tailgate 37
– Without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 36
Unlocking, from the inside 35
Unlocking, hood 238
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Update, software 188
Upholstery care 260
USB audio interface 182
V
Vacuum cleaner, connecting,
refer to Connecting electrical
devices 114
Vehicle
–
Identification number 192
Vehicle battery, changing 251
Vehicle, breaking in 126
Vehicle care 260
Vehicle care, refer to
Care 259
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 238
Vehicle jack 251
Vehicle paint 260
Vehicle storage 262
Vehicle, switching off 55
Vehicle wash 259
Ventilation
–
Draft-free 108
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 108
Version of the navigation
data 138
Video playback 172
Video playback, iPhone 184
Video playback, snap-in
adapter 184
Voice activation
– Navigation 146
Voice activation, mobile
phone 200
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 268
Voice activation system 25
Volume, setting 160
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 15
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Warning signal volumes 161
Warning triangle 254
Washer/wiper system 59
Washer/wiper system, rain
sensor 60
Washer/wiper system, washer
fluid 61
Washer/wiper system, wind‐
shield washer nozzles 61
Washer fluid 61
Washer fluid reservoir 62
Washing, vehicle 259
Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
tray 114
Water on roads, refer to Driving
through water 127
Weights 267
Welcome lamps 80
Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
sions 266
Wheel change 250
Wheels and tires 228
Wheels, changing 235
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 88
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Width, refer to Dimen‐
sions 266
Window, convenient opera‐
tion 32
Windows
– Safety switch 41
Windows, defrosting and de‐
fogging
– Automatic climate con‐
trol 107
Windows, pinch protection 40
Windshield, cleaning 60
Windshield, defrosting, refer
to Defrosting windows 107
Windshield wash 59
Windshield washer fluid 61
Windshield wash, rear win‐
dow 61
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 62
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 62
Windshield wash, washer noz‐
zles 61
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 245
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 59
Winter storage, care 262
Winter tires, setting the speed
limit 79
Winter tires, suitable tires 236
Winter tires, tread 234
Wiper blades, changing 245
Wiper fluid 61
Wood, care 261
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Working in the engine com‐
partment 238
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 245
X
xDrive 96
Xenon headlamps
–
Bulb replacement 248
Seite 288
Reference Everything from A to Z
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 914 595 ue
*BL2914595007*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 914 595 - VI/12
